1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2024 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 */ 222 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 224 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 230 }; 231 232 /** 233 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 234 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 235 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 236 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 237 */ 238 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 239 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 240 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 241 }; 242 243 /** 244 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 245 * 246 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 247 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 248 * 249 * @def: the channel definition 250 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 251 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 252 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 253 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 254 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 255 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 256 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 257 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 258 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 259 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 260 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 261 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 262 */ 263 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 264 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 265 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 266 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 267 268 int radio_idx; 269 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 270 271 bool radar_enabled; 272 273 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 274 }; 275 276 /** 277 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 278 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 279 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 280 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 281 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 282 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 283 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 284 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 285 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 286 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 287 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 288 * for changes/removal.) 289 */ 290 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 291 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 292 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 293 }; 294 295 /** 296 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 297 * 298 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 299 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 300 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 301 * done. 302 * 303 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 304 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 305 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 306 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 307 */ 308 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 310 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 311 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 312 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 313 }; 314 315 /** 316 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 317 * 318 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 319 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 320 * 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 322 * also implies a change in the AID. 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 324 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 326 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 329 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 330 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 332 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 334 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 339 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 346 * changed 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 348 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 350 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 351 * context had been assigned. 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 353 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 355 * keep alive) changed. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 357 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 358 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 362 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 364 * status changed. 365 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 368 */ 369 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 370 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 371 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 372 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 373 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 375 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 376 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 377 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 378 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 379 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 380 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 381 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 383 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 384 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 385 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 386 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 387 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 388 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 389 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 390 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 391 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 392 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 393 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 394 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 395 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 396 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 398 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 399 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 400 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 401 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 402 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 403 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 404 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 405 406 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 407 }; 408 409 /* 410 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 411 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 412 * filtering will be disabled. 413 */ 414 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 415 416 /** 417 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 418 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 419 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 420 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 421 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 422 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 423 * once each time the timeout triggers. 424 */ 425 enum ieee80211_event_type { 426 RSSI_EVENT, 427 MLME_EVENT, 428 BAR_RX_EVENT, 429 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 430 }; 431 432 /** 433 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 434 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 435 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 436 */ 437 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 438 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 439 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 440 }; 441 442 /** 443 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 444 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 445 */ 446 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 447 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 448 }; 449 450 /** 451 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 452 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 453 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 454 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 455 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 456 */ 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 458 AUTH_EVENT, 459 ASSOC_EVENT, 460 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 461 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 462 }; 463 464 /** 465 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 466 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 467 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 468 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 469 */ 470 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 471 MLME_SUCCESS, 472 MLME_DENIED, 473 MLME_TIMEOUT, 474 }; 475 476 /** 477 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 478 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 479 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 480 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 481 */ 482 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 483 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 484 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 485 u16 reason; 486 }; 487 488 /** 489 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 490 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 491 * @tid: the tid 492 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 493 */ 494 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 495 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 496 u16 tid; 497 u16 ssn; 498 }; 499 500 /** 501 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 502 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 503 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 504 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 505 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 506 * @u:union holding the fields above 507 */ 508 struct ieee80211_event { 509 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 510 union { 511 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 512 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 513 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 514 } u; 515 }; 516 517 /** 518 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 519 * 520 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 521 * 522 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 523 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 524 */ 525 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 526 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 527 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 528 }; 529 530 /** 531 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 532 * 533 * @lci: LCI subelement content 534 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 535 * @lci_len: LCI data length 536 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 537 */ 538 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 539 const u8 *lci; 540 const u8 *civicloc; 541 size_t lci_len; 542 size_t civicloc_len; 543 }; 544 545 /** 546 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 547 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 548 * 549 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 550 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 551 */ 552 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 553 u32 min_interval; 554 u32 max_interval; 555 }; 556 557 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 558 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 559 bool valid; 560 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 561 u8 count; 562 }; 563 564 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 565 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 566 bool valid; 567 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 568 u8 count, n; 569 }; 570 571 /** 572 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 573 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 574 * (indexed by TX power category) 575 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 576 * 160, 320 MHz each 577 * (indexed by TX power category) 578 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 579 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 580 * (indexed by TX power category) 581 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 582 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 583 * (indexed by TX power category) 584 */ 585 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 586 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 587 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 588 }; 589 590 /** 591 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 592 * 593 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 594 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 595 * 596 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 597 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 598 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 599 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 600 * responses. 601 * @addr: (link) address used locally 602 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 603 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 604 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 605 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 606 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 607 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 608 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 609 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 610 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 611 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 612 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 613 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 614 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 615 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 616 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 617 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 618 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 619 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 620 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 621 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 622 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 623 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 624 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 625 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 626 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 627 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 628 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 629 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 630 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 631 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 632 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 633 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 634 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 635 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 636 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 637 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 638 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 639 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 640 * the current band. 641 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 642 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 643 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 644 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 645 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 646 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 647 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 648 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 649 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 650 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 651 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 652 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 653 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 654 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 655 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 656 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 657 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 658 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 659 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 660 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 661 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 662 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 663 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 664 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 665 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 666 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 667 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 668 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 669 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 670 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 671 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 672 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 673 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 674 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 675 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 676 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 677 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 678 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 679 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 680 * station. 681 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 682 * responder functionality. 683 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 684 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 685 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 686 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 687 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 688 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 689 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 690 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 691 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 692 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 693 * connected to (STA) 694 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 695 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 696 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 697 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 698 * interval. 699 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 700 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 701 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 702 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 703 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 704 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 705 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 706 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 707 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 708 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 709 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 710 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 711 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 712 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 713 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 714 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 715 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 716 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 717 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 718 * beamformer 719 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 720 * beamformee 721 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 722 * beamformer 723 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 724 * beamformee 725 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 726 * beamformer 727 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 728 * beamformee 729 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 730 * beamformer 731 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 732 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 733 * bandwidth 734 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 735 * beamformer 736 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 737 * beamformee 738 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 739 * beamformer 740 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 741 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 742 * bandwidth 743 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 744 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 745 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 746 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 747 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 748 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 749 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 750 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 751 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 752 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 753 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 754 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 755 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 756 */ 757 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 759 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 760 761 const u8 *bssid; 762 unsigned int link_id; 763 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 764 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 765 bool uora_exists; 766 u8 uora_ocw_range; 767 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 768 bool he_support; 769 bool twt_requester; 770 bool twt_responder; 771 bool twt_protected; 772 bool twt_broadcast; 773 /* erp related data */ 774 bool use_cts_prot; 775 bool use_short_preamble; 776 bool use_short_slot; 777 bool enable_beacon; 778 u8 dtim_period; 779 u16 beacon_int; 780 u16 assoc_capability; 781 u64 sync_tsf; 782 u32 sync_device_ts; 783 u8 sync_dtim_count; 784 u32 basic_rates; 785 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 786 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 787 u16 ht_operation_mode; 788 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 789 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 790 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 791 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 792 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 793 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 794 bool qos; 795 bool hidden_ssid; 796 int txpower; 797 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 798 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 799 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 800 u16 max_idle_period; 801 bool protected_keep_alive; 802 bool ftm_responder; 803 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 804 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 805 bool nontransmitted; 806 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 807 u8 bssid_index; 808 u8 bssid_indicator; 809 bool ema_ap; 810 u8 profile_periodicity; 811 struct { 812 u32 params; 813 u16 nss_set; 814 } he_oper; 815 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 816 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 817 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 818 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 819 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 820 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 821 822 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 823 824 u8 pwr_reduction; 825 bool eht_support; 826 827 bool csa_active; 828 829 bool mu_mimo_owner; 830 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 831 832 bool color_change_active; 833 u8 color_change_color; 834 835 bool ht_ldpc; 836 bool vht_ldpc; 837 bool he_ldpc; 838 bool vht_su_beamformer; 839 bool vht_su_beamformee; 840 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 841 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 842 bool he_su_beamformer; 843 bool he_su_beamformee; 844 bool he_mu_beamformer; 845 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 846 bool eht_su_beamformer; 847 bool eht_su_beamformee; 848 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 849 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 850 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 851 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 852 }; 853 854 /** 855 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 856 * 857 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 858 * 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 861 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 862 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 863 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 864 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 865 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 866 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 867 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 868 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 869 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 870 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 871 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 872 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 873 * station 874 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 878 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 879 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 880 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 881 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 882 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 883 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 884 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 885 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 886 * hardware queue. 887 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 888 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 889 * is for the whole aggregation. 890 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 891 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 892 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 893 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 894 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 896 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 897 * off-channel operation. 898 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 899 * (header conversion) 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 901 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 902 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 903 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 904 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 905 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 906 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 907 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 908 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 909 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 910 * queue gets full. 911 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 912 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 913 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 914 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 915 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 916 * should kick the MLME state machine. 917 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 918 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 919 * status to user space) 920 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 921 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 922 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 923 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 924 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 925 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 926 * handled properly by the device. 927 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 928 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 929 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 930 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 931 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 932 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 933 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 934 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 935 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 936 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 937 * PS-Poll responses. 938 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 939 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 940 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 941 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 942 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 943 * monitor injection). 944 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 945 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 946 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 947 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 948 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 949 * 950 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 951 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 952 */ 953 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 954 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 955 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 956 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 957 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 958 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 959 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 960 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 961 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 962 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 963 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 964 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 965 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 966 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 967 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 968 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 969 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 970 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 971 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 972 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 973 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 974 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 975 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 976 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 977 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 978 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 979 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 980 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 981 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 982 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 983 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 984 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 985 }; 986 987 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 988 989 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 990 991 /** 992 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 993 * 994 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 995 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 996 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 997 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 998 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1002 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1003 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1004 * it can be sent out. 1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1006 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1008 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1009 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1010 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1011 * for sequence number assignment 1012 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1013 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1014 * operation on the interface. 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1016 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1017 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1018 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1019 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1020 * it's intended for an MLD. 1021 * 1022 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1023 */ 1024 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1025 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1026 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1027 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1028 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1029 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1030 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1031 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1032 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1033 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1034 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1035 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1036 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1037 }; 1038 1039 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1040 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1041 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1042 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1043 1044 /** 1045 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1046 * 1047 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1048 * 1049 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1050 */ 1051 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1052 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1053 }; 1054 1055 /* 1056 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1057 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1058 */ 1059 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1060 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1061 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1062 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1063 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1064 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1065 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1066 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1067 1068 /** 1069 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1070 * Rate Control algorithm. 1071 * 1072 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1073 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1074 * 1075 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1076 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1077 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1078 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1079 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1080 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1081 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1082 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1083 * Greenfield mode. 1084 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1085 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1086 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1087 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1088 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1089 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1090 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1091 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1092 */ 1093 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1094 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1095 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1096 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1097 1098 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1099 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1100 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1101 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1102 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1103 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1104 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1105 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1106 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1107 }; 1108 1109 1110 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1111 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1112 1113 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1114 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1115 1116 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1117 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1118 1119 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1120 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1121 1122 /** 1123 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1124 * 1125 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1126 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1127 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1128 * 1129 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1130 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1131 * 1132 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1133 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1134 * 1135 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1136 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1137 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1138 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1139 * information:: 1140 * 1141 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1142 * 1143 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1144 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1145 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1146 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1147 * information should then contain:: 1148 * 1149 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1150 * 1151 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1152 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1153 */ 1154 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1155 s8 idx; 1156 u16 count:5, 1157 flags:11; 1158 } __packed; 1159 1160 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1161 1162 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1163 { 1164 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1165 } 1166 1167 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1168 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1169 { 1170 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1171 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1172 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1173 } 1174 1175 static inline u8 1176 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1177 { 1178 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1179 } 1180 1181 static inline u8 1182 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1183 { 1184 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1185 } 1186 1187 /** 1188 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1189 * 1190 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1191 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1192 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1193 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1194 * 1195 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1196 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1197 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1198 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1199 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1200 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1201 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1202 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1203 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1204 * @control: union part for control data 1205 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1206 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1207 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1208 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1209 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1210 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1211 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1212 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1213 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1214 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1215 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1216 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1217 * @pad: padding 1218 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1219 * @status: union part for status data 1220 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1221 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1222 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1223 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1224 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1225 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1226 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1227 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1228 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1229 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1230 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1231 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1232 */ 1233 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1234 /* common information */ 1235 u32 flags; 1236 u32 band:3, 1237 status_data_idr:1, 1238 status_data:13, 1239 hw_queue:4, 1240 tx_time_est:10; 1241 /* 1 free bit */ 1242 1243 union { 1244 struct { 1245 union { 1246 /* rate control */ 1247 struct { 1248 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1249 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1250 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1251 u8 use_rts:1; 1252 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1253 u8 short_preamble:1; 1254 u8 skip_table:1; 1255 1256 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1257 u8 antennas:2; 1258 1259 /* 14 bits free */ 1260 }; 1261 /* only needed before rate control */ 1262 unsigned long jiffies; 1263 }; 1264 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1266 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1267 u32 flags; 1268 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1269 } control; 1270 struct { 1271 u64 cookie; 1272 } ack; 1273 struct { 1274 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1275 s32 ack_signal; 1276 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1277 u8 ampdu_len; 1278 u8 antenna; 1279 u8 pad; 1280 u16 tx_time; 1281 u8 flags; 1282 u8 pad2; 1283 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1284 } status; 1285 struct { 1286 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1287 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1288 u8 pad[4]; 1289 1290 void *rate_driver_data[ 1291 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1292 }; 1293 void *driver_data[ 1294 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1295 }; 1296 }; 1297 1298 static inline u16 1299 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1300 { 1301 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1302 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1303 */ 1304 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1305 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1306 } 1307 1308 static inline u16 1309 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1310 { 1311 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1312 } 1313 1314 /*** 1315 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1316 * 1317 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1318 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1319 * 1320 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1321 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1322 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1323 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1324 * that was used when sending the packet. 1325 */ 1326 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1327 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1328 u8 try_count; 1329 u8 tx_power_idx; 1330 }; 1331 1332 /** 1333 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1334 * 1335 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1336 * @info: Basic tx status information 1337 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1338 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1339 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1340 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1341 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1342 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1343 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1344 */ 1345 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1347 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1348 struct sk_buff *skb; 1349 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1350 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1351 u8 n_rates; 1352 1353 struct list_head *free_list; 1354 }; 1355 1356 /** 1357 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1358 * 1359 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1360 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1361 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1362 * 1363 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1364 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1365 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1366 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1367 */ 1368 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1369 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1370 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1371 const u8 *common_ies; 1372 size_t common_ie_len; 1373 }; 1374 1375 1376 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1377 { 1378 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1379 } 1380 1381 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1382 { 1383 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1384 } 1385 1386 /** 1387 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1388 * 1389 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1390 * 1391 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1392 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1393 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1394 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1395 * 1396 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1397 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1398 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1399 */ 1400 static inline void 1401 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1402 { 1403 int i; 1404 1405 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1406 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1407 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1408 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1409 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1410 /* clear the rate counts */ 1411 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1412 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1413 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1414 } 1415 1416 1417 /** 1418 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1419 * 1420 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1421 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1422 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1423 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1424 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1425 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1426 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1427 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1428 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1429 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1430 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1431 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1432 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1433 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1434 * de-duplication by itself. 1435 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1436 * the frame. 1437 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1438 * the frame. 1439 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1440 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1441 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1442 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1443 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1444 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1445 * merging. 1446 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1447 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1448 * (including FCS) was received. 1449 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1450 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1451 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1452 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1453 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1454 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1455 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1456 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1457 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1458 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1459 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1460 * each A-MPDU 1461 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1462 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1463 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1464 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1465 * on this subframe 1466 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1467 * done by the hardware 1468 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1469 * processing it in any regular way. 1470 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1471 * them for sniffing purposes. 1472 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1473 * monitor interfaces. 1474 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1475 * them for sniffing purposes. 1476 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1477 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1478 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1479 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1480 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1481 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1482 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1483 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1484 * interleaved with other frames. 1485 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1486 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1487 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1488 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1489 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1490 * in the skb. 1491 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1492 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1493 * the first subframe. 1494 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1495 * be done in the hardware. 1496 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1497 * frame 1498 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1499 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1500 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1501 * 1502 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1503 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1504 * - DATA3_CODING 1505 * - DATA5_GI 1506 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1507 * - DATA6_NSTS 1508 * - DATA3_STBC 1509 * 1510 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1511 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1512 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1513 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1514 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1515 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1516 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1517 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1518 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1519 * hardware or driver) 1520 */ 1521 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1522 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1523 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1524 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1525 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1526 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1527 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1528 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1529 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1530 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1531 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1532 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1533 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1534 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1535 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1536 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1537 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1538 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1539 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1540 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1541 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1542 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1543 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1544 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1545 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1546 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1547 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1548 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1549 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1550 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1551 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1552 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1553 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1554 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1555 }; 1556 1557 /** 1558 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1559 * 1560 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1561 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1562 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1563 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1564 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1565 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1566 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1567 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1568 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1569 */ 1570 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1571 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1572 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1573 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1574 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1575 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1576 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1577 }; 1578 1579 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1580 1581 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1582 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1583 RX_ENC_HT, 1584 RX_ENC_VHT, 1585 RX_ENC_HE, 1586 RX_ENC_EHT, 1587 }; 1588 1589 /** 1590 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1591 * 1592 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1593 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1594 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1595 * 1596 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1597 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1598 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1599 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1600 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1601 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1602 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1603 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1604 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1605 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1606 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1607 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1608 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1609 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1610 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1611 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1612 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1613 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1614 * values were filled. 1615 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1616 * support dB or unspecified units) 1617 * @antenna: antenna used 1618 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1619 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1620 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only) 1621 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1622 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1623 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1624 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1625 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1626 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1627 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1628 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1629 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1630 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1631 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1632 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1633 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1634 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1635 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1636 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1637 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1638 * @link_valid. 1639 */ 1640 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1641 u64 mactime; 1642 union { 1643 u64 boottime_ns; 1644 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1645 }; 1646 u32 device_timestamp; 1647 u32 ampdu_reference; 1648 u32 flag; 1649 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1650 u8 enc_flags; 1651 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1652 union { 1653 struct { 1654 u8 he_ru:3; 1655 u8 he_gi:2; 1656 u8 he_dcm:1; 1657 }; 1658 struct { 1659 u8 ru:4; 1660 u8 gi:2; 1661 } eht; 1662 }; 1663 u8 rate_idx; 1664 u8 nss; 1665 u8 rx_flags; 1666 u8 band; 1667 u8 antenna; 1668 s8 signal; 1669 u8 chains; 1670 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1671 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1672 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1673 }; 1674 1675 static inline u32 1676 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1677 { 1678 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1679 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1680 } 1681 1682 /** 1683 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1684 * 1685 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1686 * 1687 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1688 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1689 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1690 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1691 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1692 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1693 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1694 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1695 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1696 * for more. 1697 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1698 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1699 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1700 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1701 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1702 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1703 * operating channel. 1704 */ 1705 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1706 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1707 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1708 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1709 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1710 }; 1711 1712 1713 /** 1714 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1715 * 1716 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1717 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1718 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1719 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1720 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1721 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1722 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1723 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1724 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1725 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1726 */ 1727 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1728 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1729 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1730 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1731 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1732 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1733 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1734 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1735 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1736 }; 1737 1738 /** 1739 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1740 * 1741 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1742 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1743 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1744 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1745 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1746 */ 1747 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1748 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1749 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1750 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1751 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1752 1753 /* keep last */ 1754 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1755 }; 1756 1757 /** 1758 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1759 * 1760 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1761 * 1762 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1763 * 1764 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1765 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1766 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1767 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1768 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1769 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1770 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1771 * 1772 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1773 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1774 * 1775 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1776 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1777 * 1778 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1779 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1780 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1781 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1782 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1783 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1784 * 1785 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1786 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1787 * configured for an HT channel. 1788 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1789 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1790 */ 1791 struct ieee80211_conf { 1792 u32 flags; 1793 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1794 1795 u16 listen_interval; 1796 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1797 1798 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1799 1800 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1801 bool radar_enabled; 1802 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1803 }; 1804 1805 /** 1806 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1807 * 1808 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1809 * operation. 1810 * 1811 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1812 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1813 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1814 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1815 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1816 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1817 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1818 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1819 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1820 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1821 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1822 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1823 * channel, expressed in TU. 1824 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1825 */ 1826 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1827 u64 timestamp; 1828 u32 device_timestamp; 1829 bool block_tx; 1830 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1831 u8 count; 1832 u8 link_id; 1833 u32 delay; 1834 }; 1835 1836 /** 1837 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1838 * 1839 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1840 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1841 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1842 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1843 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1844 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1845 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1846 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1847 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1848 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1849 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1850 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1851 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1852 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1853 * enabled for the interface. 1854 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 1855 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 1856 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 1857 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 1858 * @IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC: indicates that the AP sta should 1859 * be removed only after setting the vif as unassociated, and not the 1860 * opposite. Only relevant for STA vifs. 1861 */ 1862 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1863 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1864 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1865 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1866 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1867 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 1868 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 1869 IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC = BIT(6), 1870 }; 1871 1872 1873 /** 1874 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1875 * 1876 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1877 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1878 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1879 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1880 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1881 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1882 * mac80211. 1883 */ 1884 1885 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1886 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1887 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1888 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1889 }; 1890 1891 /** 1892 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1893 * @assoc: association status 1894 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1895 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1896 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1897 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1898 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1899 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 1900 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 1901 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 1902 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 1903 * Figure 9-1001k 1904 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1905 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1906 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1907 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1908 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1909 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1910 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1911 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1912 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1913 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1914 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1915 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1916 * your driver/device needs to do. 1917 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1918 * (station mode only) 1919 */ 1920 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1921 /* association related data */ 1922 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1923 bool ibss_creator; 1924 bool ps; 1925 u16 aid; 1926 u16 eml_cap; 1927 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 1928 u16 mld_capa_op; 1929 1930 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1931 int arp_addr_cnt; 1932 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1933 size_t ssid_len; 1934 bool s1g; 1935 bool idle; 1936 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1937 }; 1938 1939 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 1940 1941 /** 1942 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 1943 * 1944 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 1945 * this TID is not included. 1946 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 1947 * TID is not included. 1948 * @valid: info is valid or not. 1949 */ 1950 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 1951 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1952 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1953 bool valid; 1954 }; 1955 1956 /** 1957 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 1958 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 1959 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 1960 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 1961 */ 1962 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 1963 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 1964 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 1965 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 1966 }; 1967 1968 /** 1969 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1970 * 1971 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1972 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1973 * 1974 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1975 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1976 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1977 * or the BSS we're associated to 1978 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1979 * indexed by link ID 1980 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1981 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1982 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1983 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1984 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 1985 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 1986 * 0 for non-MLO. 1987 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 1988 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 1989 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 1990 * 0 for non-MLO. 1991 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 1992 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 1993 * @addr: address of this interface 1994 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 1995 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 1996 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1997 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1998 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1999 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 2000 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 2001 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 2002 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 2003 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2004 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2005 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2006 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2007 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2008 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2009 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2010 * restrictions. 2011 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2012 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2013 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2014 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2015 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2016 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2017 * interface. 2018 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2019 * for this interface. 2020 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2021 * sizeof(void \*). 2022 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2023 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2024 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2025 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 2026 */ 2027 struct ieee80211_vif { 2028 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2029 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2030 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2031 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2032 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2033 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2034 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2035 bool addr_valid; 2036 bool p2p; 2037 2038 u8 cab_queue; 2039 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2040 2041 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2042 2043 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2044 u32 driver_flags; 2045 u32 offload_flags; 2046 2047 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2048 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2049 #endif 2050 2051 bool probe_req_reg; 2052 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2053 2054 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 2055 2056 /* must be last */ 2057 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2058 }; 2059 2060 /** 2061 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2062 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2063 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2064 */ 2065 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2066 { 2067 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2068 } 2069 2070 /** 2071 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2072 * @vif: the vif 2073 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2074 */ 2075 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2076 { 2077 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2078 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2079 } 2080 2081 /** 2082 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2083 * @vif: the vif 2084 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2085 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2086 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2087 */ 2088 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2089 unsigned int link_id) 2090 { 2091 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2092 return link_id == 0; 2093 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2094 } 2095 2096 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2097 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2098 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2099 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2100 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2101 2102 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2103 { 2104 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2105 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2106 #endif 2107 return false; 2108 } 2109 2110 /** 2111 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2112 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2113 * 2114 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2115 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2116 * 2117 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2118 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2119 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2120 */ 2121 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2122 2123 /** 2124 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2125 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2126 * 2127 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2128 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2129 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2130 * 2131 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2132 */ 2133 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2134 2135 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2136 { 2137 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2138 } 2139 2140 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2141 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2142 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2143 2144 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2145 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2146 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2147 2148 /** 2149 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2150 * 2151 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2152 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2153 * 2154 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2155 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2156 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2157 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2158 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2159 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2160 * generation in software. 2161 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2162 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2163 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2164 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2165 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2166 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2167 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2168 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2169 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2170 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2171 * MIC. 2172 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2173 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2174 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2175 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2176 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2177 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2178 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2179 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2180 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2181 * only for management frames (MFP). 2182 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2183 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2184 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2185 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2186 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2187 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2188 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2189 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2190 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2191 * number generation only 2192 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2193 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2194 */ 2195 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2196 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2197 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2198 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2199 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2200 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2201 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2202 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2203 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2204 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2205 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2206 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2207 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2208 }; 2209 2210 /** 2211 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2212 * 2213 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2214 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2215 * 2216 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2217 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2218 * encrypted in hardware. 2219 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2220 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2221 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2222 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2223 * @keyidx: the key index (0-7) 2224 * @keylen: key material length 2225 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2226 * data block: 2227 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2228 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2229 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2230 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2231 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2232 * @link_id: the link ID, 0 for non-MLO, or -1 for pairwise keys 2233 */ 2234 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2235 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2236 u32 cipher; 2237 u8 icv_len; 2238 u8 iv_len; 2239 u8 hw_key_idx; 2240 s8 keyidx; 2241 u16 flags; 2242 s8 link_id; 2243 u8 keylen; 2244 u8 key[]; 2245 }; 2246 2247 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2248 2249 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2250 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2251 2252 /** 2253 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2254 * 2255 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2256 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2257 * reverse order than in packet) 2258 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2259 * reverse order than in packet) 2260 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2261 * reverse order than in packet) 2262 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2263 * reverse order than in packet) 2264 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2265 */ 2266 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2267 union { 2268 struct { 2269 u32 iv32; 2270 u16 iv16; 2271 } tkip; 2272 struct { 2273 u8 pn[6]; 2274 } ccmp; 2275 struct { 2276 u8 pn[6]; 2277 } aes_cmac; 2278 struct { 2279 u8 pn[6]; 2280 } aes_gmac; 2281 struct { 2282 u8 pn[6]; 2283 } gcmp; 2284 struct { 2285 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2286 u8 seq_len; 2287 } hw; 2288 }; 2289 }; 2290 2291 /** 2292 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2293 * 2294 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2295 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2296 * 2297 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2298 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2299 */ 2300 enum set_key_cmd { 2301 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2302 }; 2303 2304 /** 2305 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2306 * 2307 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2308 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2309 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2310 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2311 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2312 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2313 */ 2314 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2315 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2316 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2317 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2318 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2319 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2320 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2321 }; 2322 2323 /** 2324 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2325 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2326 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2327 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2328 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2329 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2330 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2331 * 2332 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2333 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2334 */ 2335 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2336 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2337 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2338 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2339 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2340 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2341 }; 2342 2343 #define IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_MAX IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320 2344 2345 /** 2346 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2347 * 2348 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2349 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2350 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2351 */ 2352 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2353 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2354 struct { 2355 s8 idx; 2356 u8 count; 2357 u8 count_cts; 2358 u8 count_rts; 2359 u16 flags; 2360 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2361 }; 2362 2363 /** 2364 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2365 * 2366 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2367 * 2368 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2369 * to the STA. 2370 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2371 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2372 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2373 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2374 * per peer TPC. 2375 */ 2376 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2377 s16 power; 2378 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2379 }; 2380 2381 /** 2382 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2383 * 2384 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2385 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2386 * 2387 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2388 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2389 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2390 * 2391 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2392 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2393 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2394 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2395 * 2396 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2397 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2398 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2399 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2400 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2401 */ 2402 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2403 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2404 2405 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2406 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2407 }; 2408 2409 /** 2410 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2411 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2412 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2413 * 2414 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2415 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2416 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2417 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2418 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2419 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2420 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2421 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2422 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2423 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2424 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2425 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2426 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2427 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2428 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2429 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2430 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2431 * the station moves to associated state. 2432 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2433 * 2434 */ 2435 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2436 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2437 2438 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2439 u8 link_id; 2440 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2441 2442 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2443 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2444 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2445 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2446 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2447 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2448 2449 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2450 2451 u8 rx_nss; 2452 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2453 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2454 }; 2455 2456 /** 2457 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2458 * 2459 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2460 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2461 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2462 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2463 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2464 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2465 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2466 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2467 * 2468 * @addr: MAC address 2469 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2470 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2471 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2472 * Can be modified by driver. 2473 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2474 * otherwise always false) 2475 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2476 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2477 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2478 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2479 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2480 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2481 * @rates: rate control selection table 2482 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2483 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2484 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2485 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2486 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2487 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2488 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2489 * unlimited. 2490 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2491 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2492 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2493 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2494 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2495 * is used for non-data frames 2496 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2497 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2498 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2499 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2500 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2501 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2502 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2503 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2504 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2505 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2506 * by the AP. 2507 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2508 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2509 */ 2510 struct ieee80211_sta { 2511 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2512 u16 aid; 2513 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2514 bool wme; 2515 u8 uapsd_queues; 2516 u8 max_sp; 2517 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2518 bool tdls; 2519 bool tdls_initiator; 2520 bool mfp; 2521 bool mlo; 2522 bool spp_amsdu; 2523 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2524 2525 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2526 2527 bool support_p2p_ps; 2528 2529 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2530 2531 u16 valid_links; 2532 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2533 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2534 2535 /* must be last */ 2536 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2537 }; 2538 2539 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2540 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2541 #else 2542 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2543 { 2544 return true; 2545 } 2546 #endif 2547 2548 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2549 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2550 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2551 2552 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2553 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2554 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2555 2556 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2557 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2558 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2559 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2560 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2561 2562 /** 2563 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2564 * 2565 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2566 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2567 * 2568 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2569 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2570 */ 2571 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2572 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2573 }; 2574 2575 /** 2576 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2577 * 2578 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2579 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2580 */ 2581 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2582 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2583 }; 2584 2585 /** 2586 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2587 * 2588 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2589 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2590 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2591 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2592 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2593 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2594 * 2595 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2596 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2597 */ 2598 struct ieee80211_txq { 2599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2600 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2601 u8 tid; 2602 u8 ac; 2603 2604 /* must be last */ 2605 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2606 }; 2607 2608 /** 2609 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2610 * 2611 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2612 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2613 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2614 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2615 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2616 * 2617 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2618 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2619 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2620 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2621 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2622 * algorithm. 2623 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2624 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2625 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2626 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2627 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2628 * CCK frames. 2629 * 2630 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2631 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2632 * the FCS at the end. 2633 * 2634 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2635 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2636 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2637 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2638 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2639 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2640 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2641 * 2642 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2643 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2644 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2645 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2646 * 2647 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2648 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2649 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2650 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2651 * 2652 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2653 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2654 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2655 * 2656 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2657 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2658 * 2659 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2660 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2661 * 2662 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2663 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2664 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2665 * 2666 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2667 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2668 * 2669 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2670 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2671 * 2672 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2673 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2674 * the stack. 2675 * 2676 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2677 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2678 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2679 * 2680 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2681 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2682 * dtim_period). 2683 * 2684 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2685 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2686 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2687 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2688 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2689 * only in that case. 2690 * 2691 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2692 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2693 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2694 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2695 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2696 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2697 * 2698 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2699 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2700 * software. 2701 * 2702 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2703 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2704 * active interfaces. 2705 * 2706 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2707 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2708 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2709 * channels. 2710 * 2711 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2712 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2713 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2714 * 2715 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2716 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2717 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2718 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2719 * supported cipher suites. 2720 * 2721 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2722 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2723 * for frames. 2724 * 2725 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2726 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2727 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2728 * control for more details. 2729 * 2730 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2731 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2732 * 2733 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2734 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2735 * is supported. 2736 * 2737 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2738 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2739 * 2740 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2741 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2742 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2743 * 2744 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2745 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2746 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2747 * CSA frame. 2748 * 2749 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2750 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2751 * 2752 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2753 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2754 * 2755 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2756 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2757 * 2758 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2759 * within A-MPDU. 2760 * 2761 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2762 * for sent beacons. 2763 * 2764 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2765 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2766 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2767 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2768 * 2769 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2770 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2771 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2772 * timeout. 2773 * 2774 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2775 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2776 * 2777 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2778 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2779 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2780 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2781 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2782 * 2783 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2784 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2785 * 2786 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2787 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2788 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2789 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2790 * 2791 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2792 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2793 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2794 * 2795 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2796 * TDLS links. 2797 * 2798 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2799 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2800 * 2801 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2802 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2803 * 2804 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2805 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2806 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2807 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2808 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2809 * 2810 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2811 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2812 * TXQs to start with. 2813 * 2814 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2815 * length in tx status information 2816 * 2817 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2818 * 2819 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2820 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2821 * 2822 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2823 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2824 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2825 * 2826 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2827 * offload 2828 * 2829 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2830 * offload 2831 * 2832 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2833 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2834 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2835 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2836 * the stack. 2837 * 2838 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2839 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2840 * 2841 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2842 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2843 * 2844 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 2845 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2846 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ: HW requires disabling puncturing in 2847 * EHT in 5 GHz and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2848 * 2849 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 2850 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 2851 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 2852 * link is switching. 2853 * 2854 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2855 */ 2856 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2857 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2858 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2859 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2860 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2861 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2862 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2863 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2864 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2865 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2866 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2867 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2868 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2869 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2870 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 2871 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2872 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2873 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2874 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2875 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2876 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2877 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2878 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2879 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2880 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2881 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2882 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2883 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2884 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2885 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2886 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2887 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2888 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2889 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2890 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2891 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2892 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2893 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2894 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2895 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2896 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2897 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2898 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2899 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2900 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2901 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2902 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2903 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2904 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2905 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2906 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2907 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2908 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2909 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2910 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2911 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 2912 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ, 2913 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 2914 2915 /* keep last, obviously */ 2916 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2917 }; 2918 2919 /** 2920 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2921 * 2922 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2923 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2924 * 2925 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2926 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2927 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2928 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2929 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2930 * 2931 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2932 * 2933 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2934 * along with this structure. 2935 * 2936 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2937 * 2938 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2939 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2940 * 2941 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2942 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2943 * 2944 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2945 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2946 * 2947 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2948 * that HW supports 2949 * 2950 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2951 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2952 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2953 * 2954 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2955 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2956 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2957 * 2958 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2959 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2960 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2961 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2962 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2963 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2964 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2965 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2966 * 2967 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2968 * can handle. 2969 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2970 * the hw can report back. 2971 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2972 * 2973 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2974 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2975 * aggregation. 2976 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2977 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2978 * it shouldn't be set. 2979 * 2980 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2981 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2982 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2983 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2984 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2985 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2986 * 2987 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2988 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2989 * 2990 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2991 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2992 * 2993 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2994 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2995 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2996 * adding _BW is supported today. 2997 * 2998 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2999 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 3000 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 3001 * 3002 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 3003 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 3004 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 3005 * device_timestamp. 3006 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3007 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3008 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3009 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3010 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3011 * 3012 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3013 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3014 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3015 * 3016 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3017 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3018 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3019 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3020 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3021 * neither enabled. 3022 * 3023 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3024 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3025 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3026 * 3027 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3028 * device. 3029 * 3030 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3031 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3032 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3033 * 3034 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3035 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3036 * 3037 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3038 * 3039 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3040 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3041 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3042 * 3043 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3044 */ 3045 struct ieee80211_hw { 3046 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3047 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3048 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3049 void *priv; 3050 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3051 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3052 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3053 int vif_data_size; 3054 int sta_data_size; 3055 int chanctx_data_size; 3056 int txq_data_size; 3057 u16 queues; 3058 u16 max_listen_interval; 3059 s8 max_signal; 3060 u8 max_rates; 3061 u8 max_report_rates; 3062 u8 max_rate_tries; 3063 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3064 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3065 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3066 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3067 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3068 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3069 struct { 3070 int units_pos; 3071 s16 accuracy; 3072 } radiotap_timestamp; 3073 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3074 u8 uapsd_queues; 3075 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3076 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3077 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3078 u8 weight_multiplier; 3079 u32 max_mtu; 3080 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3081 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3082 }; 3083 3084 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3085 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3086 { 3087 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3088 } 3089 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3090 3091 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3092 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3093 { 3094 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3095 } 3096 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3097 3098 /** 3099 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3100 * 3101 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3102 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3103 */ 3104 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3105 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3106 3107 /* Keep last */ 3108 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3109 }; 3110 3111 /** 3112 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3113 * 3114 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3115 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3116 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3117 * @status: channel-switch response status 3118 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3119 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3120 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3121 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3122 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3123 */ 3124 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3125 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3126 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3127 u8 action_code; 3128 u32 status; 3129 u32 timestamp; 3130 u16 switch_time; 3131 u16 switch_timeout; 3132 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3133 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3134 }; 3135 3136 /** 3137 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3138 * 3139 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3140 * 3141 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3142 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3143 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3144 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3145 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3146 * 3147 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3148 */ 3149 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3150 3151 /** 3152 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3153 * 3154 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3155 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3156 */ 3157 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3158 { 3159 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3160 } 3161 3162 /** 3163 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3164 * 3165 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3166 * @addr: the address to set 3167 */ 3168 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3169 { 3170 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3171 } 3172 3173 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3174 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3175 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3176 { 3177 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3178 return NULL; 3179 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3180 } 3181 3182 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3183 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3184 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3185 { 3186 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3187 return NULL; 3188 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3189 } 3190 3191 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3192 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3193 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3194 { 3195 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3196 return NULL; 3197 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3198 } 3199 3200 /** 3201 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3202 * @hw: the hardware 3203 * @skb: the skb 3204 * 3205 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3206 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3207 */ 3208 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3209 3210 /** 3211 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3212 * @hw: the hardware 3213 * @skbs: the skbs 3214 * 3215 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3216 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3217 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3218 * relevant locks to use it. 3219 */ 3220 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3221 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3222 3223 /** 3224 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3225 * 3226 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3227 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3228 * 3229 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3230 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3231 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3232 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3233 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3234 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3235 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3236 * 3237 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3238 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3239 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3240 * 3241 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3242 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3243 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3244 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3245 * 3246 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3247 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3248 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3249 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3250 * 3251 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3252 * 3253 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3254 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3255 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3256 * based on the receive flags. 3257 * 3258 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3259 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3260 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3261 * keys. 3262 * 3263 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3264 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3265 * handler. 3266 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3267 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3268 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3269 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3270 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3271 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3272 * 3273 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3274 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3275 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3276 * 3277 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3278 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3279 * requirements: 3280 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3281 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3282 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3283 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3284 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3285 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3286 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3287 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3288 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3289 */ 3290 3291 /** 3292 * DOC: Powersave support 3293 * 3294 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3295 * 3296 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3297 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3298 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3299 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3300 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3301 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3302 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3303 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3304 * 3305 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3306 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3307 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3308 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3309 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3310 * 3311 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3312 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3313 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3314 * 3315 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3316 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3317 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3318 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3319 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3320 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3321 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3322 * 3323 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3324 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3325 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3326 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3327 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3328 * periods. 3329 * 3330 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3331 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3332 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3333 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3334 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3335 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3336 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3337 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3338 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3339 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3340 * 3341 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3342 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3343 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3344 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3345 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3346 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3347 * 3348 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3349 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3350 */ 3351 3352 /** 3353 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3354 * 3355 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3356 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3357 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3358 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3359 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3360 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3361 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3362 * 3363 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3364 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3365 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3366 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3367 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3368 * 3369 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3370 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3371 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3372 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3373 * 3374 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3375 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3376 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3377 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3378 * 3379 * - a list of information element IDs 3380 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3381 * 3382 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3383 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3384 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3385 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3386 * vendor information elements. 3387 * 3388 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3389 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3390 * 3391 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3392 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3393 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3394 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3395 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3396 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3397 * 3398 * 3399 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3400 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3401 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3402 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3403 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3404 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3405 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3406 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3407 * 3408 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3409 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3410 * signal strength threshold checking. 3411 */ 3412 3413 /** 3414 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3415 * 3416 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3417 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3418 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3419 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3420 * 3421 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3422 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3423 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3424 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3425 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3426 * hardware flags. 3427 * 3428 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3429 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3430 * turned off otherwise. 3431 * 3432 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3433 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3434 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3435 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3436 */ 3437 3438 /** 3439 * DOC: Frame filtering 3440 * 3441 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3442 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3443 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3444 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3445 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3446 * 3447 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3448 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3449 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3450 * 3451 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3452 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3453 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3454 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3455 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3456 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3457 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3458 * 3459 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3460 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3461 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3462 * or dropped. 3463 * 3464 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3465 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3466 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3467 * the flag, but not clear it. 3468 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3469 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3470 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3471 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3472 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3473 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3474 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3475 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3476 */ 3477 3478 /** 3479 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3480 * 3481 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3482 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3483 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3484 * 3485 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3486 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3487 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3488 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3489 * the driver code. 3490 * 3491 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3492 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3493 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3494 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3495 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3496 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3497 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3498 * 3499 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3500 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3501 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3502 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3503 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3504 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3505 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3506 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3507 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3508 * @sta_notify callback. 3509 * 3510 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3511 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3512 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3513 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3514 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3515 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3516 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3517 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3518 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3519 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3520 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3521 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3522 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3523 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3524 * 3525 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3526 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3527 * 3528 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3529 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3530 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3531 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3532 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3533 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3534 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3535 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3536 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3537 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3538 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3539 * 3540 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3541 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3542 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3543 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3544 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3545 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3546 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3547 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3548 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3549 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3550 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3551 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3552 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3553 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3554 * 3555 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3556 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3557 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3558 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3559 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3560 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3561 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3562 * 3563 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3564 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3565 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3566 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3567 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3568 * 3569 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3570 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3571 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3572 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3573 */ 3574 3575 /** 3576 * DOC: HW queue control 3577 * 3578 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3579 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3580 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3581 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3582 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3583 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3584 * 3585 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3586 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3587 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3588 * 3589 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3590 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3591 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3592 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3593 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3594 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3595 * the hardware queue. 3596 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3597 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3598 * 3599 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3600 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3601 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3602 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3603 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3604 * 3605 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3606 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3607 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3608 * off-channel queue: 9 3609 * 3610 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3611 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3612 * 3613 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3614 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3615 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3616 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3617 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3618 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3619 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3620 * 3621 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3622 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3623 * 3624 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3625 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3626 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3627 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3628 */ 3629 3630 /** 3631 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3632 * 3633 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3634 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3635 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3636 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3637 * 3638 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3639 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3640 * multicast address. 3641 * 3642 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3643 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3644 * 3645 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3646 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3647 * 3648 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3649 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3650 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3651 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3652 * honour this flag if possible. 3653 * 3654 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3655 * station 3656 * 3657 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3658 * 3659 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3660 * 3661 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3662 * 3663 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3664 */ 3665 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3666 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3667 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3668 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3669 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3670 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3671 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3672 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3673 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3674 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3675 }; 3676 3677 /** 3678 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3679 * 3680 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3681 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3682 * 3683 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3684 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3685 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3686 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3687 * 3688 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3689 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3690 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3691 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3692 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3693 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3694 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3695 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3696 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3697 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3698 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3699 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3700 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3701 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3702 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3703 * session is gone and removes the station. 3704 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3705 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3706 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3707 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3708 */ 3709 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3710 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3711 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3712 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3713 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3714 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3715 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3716 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3717 }; 3718 3719 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3720 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3721 3722 /** 3723 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3724 * 3725 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3726 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3727 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3728 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3729 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3730 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3731 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3732 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3733 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3734 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3735 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3736 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3737 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3738 */ 3739 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3740 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3741 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3742 u16 tid; 3743 u16 ssn; 3744 u16 buf_size; 3745 bool amsdu; 3746 u16 timeout; 3747 }; 3748 3749 /** 3750 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3751 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3752 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3753 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3754 */ 3755 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3756 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3757 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3758 }; 3759 3760 /** 3761 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3762 * 3763 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3764 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3765 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3766 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3767 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3768 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3769 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3770 * the peer. 3771 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3772 * by the peer 3773 */ 3774 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3775 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3776 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3777 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3778 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3779 }; 3780 3781 /** 3782 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3783 * 3784 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3785 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3786 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3787 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3788 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3789 * 3790 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3791 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3792 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3793 */ 3794 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3795 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3796 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3797 }; 3798 3799 /** 3800 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3801 * 3802 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3803 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3804 * 3805 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3806 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3807 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3808 * of wowlan configuration) 3809 */ 3810 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3811 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3812 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3813 }; 3814 3815 /** 3816 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3817 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3818 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3819 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3820 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3821 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3822 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3823 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 3824 * while just having been associated 3825 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 3826 * Only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3827 */ 3828 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3829 u16 duration; 3830 u16 subtype; 3831 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 3832 int link_id; 3833 }; 3834 3835 /** 3836 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3837 * 3838 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3839 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3840 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3841 * 3842 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3843 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3844 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3845 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3846 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3847 * Must be atomic. 3848 * 3849 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3850 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3851 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3852 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3853 * or zero. 3854 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3855 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3856 * is added. 3857 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3858 * 3859 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3860 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3861 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3862 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3863 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3864 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3865 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3866 * 3867 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3868 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3869 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3870 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3871 * reconfigured at resume time. 3872 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3873 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3874 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3875 * must return 1 from this function. 3876 * 3877 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3878 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3879 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3880 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3881 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3882 * 3883 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3884 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3885 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3886 * in suspend(). 3887 * 3888 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3889 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3890 * and @stop must be implemented. 3891 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3892 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3893 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3894 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3895 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3896 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3897 * 3898 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3899 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3900 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3901 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3902 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3903 * 3904 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3905 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3906 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3907 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3908 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3909 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3910 * MAC address of the device going away. 3911 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3912 * 3913 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3914 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3915 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3916 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3917 * 3918 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3919 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3920 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3921 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3922 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3923 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3924 * can sleep. 3925 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3926 * are not implemented. 3927 * 3928 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3929 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3930 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3931 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3932 * The callback can sleep. 3933 * 3934 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3935 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3936 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3937 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3938 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3939 * non-MLO connections. 3940 * The callback can sleep. 3941 * 3942 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3943 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3944 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3945 * 3946 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3947 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3948 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3949 * 3950 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3951 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3952 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3953 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3954 * which flags are changed. 3955 * This callback can sleep. 3956 * 3957 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3958 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3959 * 3960 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3961 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3962 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3963 * is enabled. 3964 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3965 * The callback can sleep. 3966 * 3967 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3968 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3969 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3970 * The callback must be atomic. 3971 * 3972 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3973 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3974 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3975 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3976 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3977 * 3978 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3979 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3980 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3981 * 3982 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3983 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3984 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3985 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3986 * that power save is disabled. 3987 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3988 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3989 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3990 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3991 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3992 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3993 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3994 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3995 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3996 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3997 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3998 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3999 * The callback can sleep. 4000 * 4001 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 4002 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 4003 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 4004 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 4005 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4006 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4007 * The callback can sleep. 4008 * 4009 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4010 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4011 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4012 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4013 * 4014 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4015 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4016 * 4017 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4018 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4019 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4020 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4021 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4022 * 4023 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4024 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4025 * this notification. 4026 * The callback can sleep. 4027 * 4028 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4029 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4030 * The callback can sleep. 4031 * 4032 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4033 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4034 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4035 * The callback must be atomic. 4036 * 4037 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4038 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4039 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4040 * should be set as well. 4041 * The callback can sleep. 4042 * 4043 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4044 * The callback can sleep. 4045 * 4046 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4047 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4048 * 4049 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4050 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4051 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4052 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4053 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4054 * This callback can sleep. 4055 * 4056 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4057 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4058 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4059 * 4060 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4061 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4062 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4063 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4064 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4065 * 4066 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4067 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4068 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4069 * callback can sleep. 4070 * 4071 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4072 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4073 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4074 * callback can sleep. 4075 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4076 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4077 * 4078 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4079 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4080 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4081 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4082 * 4083 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4084 * power for the station. 4085 * This callback can sleep. 4086 * 4087 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4088 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4089 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4090 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4091 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4092 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4093 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4094 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4095 * The callback can sleep. 4096 * 4097 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4098 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4099 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4100 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4101 * in @sta_state. 4102 * The callback can sleep. 4103 * 4104 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4105 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4106 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4107 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4108 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4109 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4110 * Must be atomic. 4111 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4112 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4113 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4114 * 4115 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4116 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4117 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4118 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4119 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4120 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4121 * The callback can sleep. 4122 * 4123 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4124 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4125 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4126 * The callback can sleep. 4127 * 4128 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4129 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4130 * required function. 4131 * The callback can sleep. 4132 * 4133 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4134 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4135 * required function. 4136 * The callback can sleep. 4137 * 4138 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4139 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4140 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4141 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4142 * The callback can sleep. 4143 * 4144 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4145 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4146 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4147 * TSF synchronization. 4148 * The callback can sleep. 4149 * 4150 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4151 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4152 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4153 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4154 * The callback can sleep. 4155 * 4156 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4157 * 4158 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4159 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4160 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4161 * The callback can sleep. 4162 * 4163 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4164 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4165 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4166 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4167 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4168 * 4169 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4170 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4171 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4172 * 4173 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4174 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4175 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4176 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4177 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4178 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4179 * The callback can sleep. 4180 * 4181 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4182 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4183 * The callback can sleep. 4184 * 4185 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4186 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4187 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4188 * completion of the channel switch. 4189 * 4190 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4191 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4192 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4193 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4194 * 4195 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4196 * 4197 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4198 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4199 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4200 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4201 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4202 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4203 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4204 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4205 * must be accepted in this case. 4206 * This callback may sleep. 4207 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4208 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4209 * 4210 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4211 * 4212 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4213 * 4214 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4215 * queues before entering power save. 4216 * 4217 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4218 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4219 * The callback can sleep. 4220 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4221 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4222 * The callback must be atomic. 4223 * 4224 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4225 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4226 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4227 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4228 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4229 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4230 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4231 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4232 * more-data bit must always be set. 4233 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4234 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4235 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4236 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4237 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4238 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4239 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4240 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4241 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4242 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4243 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4244 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4245 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4246 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4247 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4248 * This callback must be atomic. 4249 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4250 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4251 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4252 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4253 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4254 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4255 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4256 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4257 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4258 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4259 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4260 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4261 * This callback must be atomic. 4262 * 4263 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4264 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4265 * expected to return a static value. 4266 * 4267 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4268 * 4269 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4270 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4271 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4272 * expected to return a static value. 4273 * 4274 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4275 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4276 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4277 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4278 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4279 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4280 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4281 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4282 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4283 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4284 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4285 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4286 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4287 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4288 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4289 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4290 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4291 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4292 * 4293 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4294 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4295 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4296 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4297 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4298 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4299 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4300 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4301 * 4302 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4303 * This callback may sleep. 4304 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4305 * This callback may sleep. 4306 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4307 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4308 * channel context with different settings 4309 * This callback may sleep. 4310 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4311 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4312 * This callback may sleep. 4313 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4314 * unbound from vif. 4315 * This callback may sleep. 4316 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4317 * another, as specified in the list of 4318 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4319 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4320 * This callback may sleep. 4321 * 4322 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4323 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4324 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4325 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4326 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4327 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4328 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4329 * 4330 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4331 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4332 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4333 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4334 * This callback may sleep. 4335 * 4336 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4337 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4338 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4339 * 4340 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4341 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4342 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4343 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4344 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4345 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4346 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4347 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4348 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4349 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4350 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4351 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4352 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4353 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4354 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4355 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4356 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4357 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4358 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4359 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4360 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4361 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4362 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4363 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4364 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4365 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4366 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4367 * 4368 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4369 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4370 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4371 * 4372 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4373 * and hardware limits. 4374 * 4375 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4376 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4377 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4378 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4379 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4380 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4381 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4382 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4383 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4384 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4385 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4386 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4387 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4388 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4389 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4390 * the function call. 4391 * 4392 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4393 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4394 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4395 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4396 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4397 * 4398 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4399 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4400 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4401 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4402 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4403 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4404 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4405 * changed parameters. 4406 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4407 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4408 * this call. 4409 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4410 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4411 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4412 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4413 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4414 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4415 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4416 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4417 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4418 * 4419 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4420 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4421 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4422 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4423 * This callback may sleep. 4424 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4425 * This callback may sleep. 4426 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4427 * 4-address mode 4428 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4429 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4430 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4431 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4432 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4433 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4434 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4435 * twt structure. 4436 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4437 * from the peer. 4438 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4439 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4440 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4441 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4442 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4443 * radar channel. 4444 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4445 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4446 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4447 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4448 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4449 * supported by the driver. 4450 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4451 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4452 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4453 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4454 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4455 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4456 * This callback can sleep. 4457 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4458 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4459 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4460 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4461 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4462 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4463 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4464 * that. 4465 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4466 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4467 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4468 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4469 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4470 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4471 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4472 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4473 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4474 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4475 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4476 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4477 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4478 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4479 */ 4480 struct ieee80211_ops { 4481 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4482 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4483 struct sk_buff *skb); 4484 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4485 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4486 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4487 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4488 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4489 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4490 #endif 4491 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4493 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4494 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4495 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4496 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4498 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4499 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4501 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4502 u64 changed); 4503 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4505 u64 changed); 4506 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4507 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4508 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4509 u64 changed); 4510 4511 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4512 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4513 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4514 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4515 4516 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4517 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4518 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4519 unsigned int changed_flags, 4520 unsigned int *total_flags, 4521 u64 multicast); 4522 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4524 unsigned int filter_flags, 4525 unsigned int changed_flags); 4526 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4527 bool set); 4528 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4529 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4530 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4531 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4532 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4533 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4534 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4535 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4536 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4537 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4538 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4539 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4540 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4541 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4542 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4543 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4545 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4546 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4547 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4548 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4549 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4550 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4551 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4552 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4553 const u8 *mac_addr); 4554 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4556 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4557 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4558 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4559 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4560 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4561 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4562 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4563 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4564 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4565 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4566 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4567 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4568 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4570 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4571 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4572 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4573 struct dentry *dir); 4574 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4575 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4576 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4577 struct dentry *dir); 4578 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4579 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4580 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4581 struct dentry *dir); 4582 #endif 4583 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4584 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4585 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4586 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4587 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4588 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4589 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4590 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4591 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4592 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4593 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4594 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4595 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4596 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4597 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4598 u32 changed); 4599 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4600 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4601 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4602 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4604 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4605 struct station_info *sinfo); 4606 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4608 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4609 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4610 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4611 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4612 u64 tsf); 4613 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4614 s64 offset); 4615 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4616 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4617 4618 /** 4619 * @ampdu_action: 4620 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4621 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4622 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4623 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4624 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4625 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4626 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4627 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4628 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4629 * 4630 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4631 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4632 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4633 * 4634 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4635 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4636 * 4637 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4638 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4639 * - ``TX: 81`` 4640 * 4641 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4642 * 4643 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4644 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4645 * if the session can start immediately. 4646 * 4647 * The callback can sleep. 4648 */ 4649 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4651 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4652 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4653 struct survey_info *survey); 4654 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4655 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4656 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4657 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4658 void *data, int len); 4659 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4660 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4661 void *data, int len); 4662 #endif 4663 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4664 u32 queues, bool drop); 4665 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4666 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4667 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4668 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4669 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4670 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4671 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4672 4673 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4674 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4675 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4676 int duration, 4677 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4678 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4679 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4680 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4681 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4682 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4683 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4684 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4685 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4686 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4688 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4689 4690 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4691 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4692 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4693 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4694 bool more_data); 4695 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4696 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4697 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4698 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4699 bool more_data); 4700 4701 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4702 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4703 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4704 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4705 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4706 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4707 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4708 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4709 4710 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4711 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4712 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4713 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4714 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4715 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4716 4717 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4718 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4719 unsigned int link_id); 4720 4721 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4722 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4723 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4724 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4725 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4726 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4727 u32 changed); 4728 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4729 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4730 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4731 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4732 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4733 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4734 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4735 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4736 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4737 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4738 int n_vifs, 4739 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4740 4741 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4742 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4743 4744 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4745 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4746 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4747 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4748 #endif 4749 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4750 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4751 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4752 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4753 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4754 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4755 4756 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4758 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4759 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4760 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4761 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4762 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4763 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4764 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4765 4766 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4767 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4768 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4769 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4770 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4771 unsigned int link_id, int *dbm); 4772 4773 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4775 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4776 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4777 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4778 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4779 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4780 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4781 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4782 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4783 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4784 4785 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4786 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4787 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4788 4789 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4790 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4791 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4792 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4794 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4796 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4797 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4798 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4799 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4800 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4802 u8 instance_id); 4803 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4804 struct sk_buff *head, 4805 struct sk_buff *skb); 4806 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4807 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4808 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4809 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4810 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4811 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4812 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4813 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4815 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4816 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4817 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4818 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4819 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4820 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4821 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4822 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4823 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4824 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4825 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4826 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4827 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4828 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4829 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4830 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4831 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4832 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4833 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4834 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4835 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4836 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4837 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4838 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4839 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4840 struct net_device_path *path); 4841 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4842 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4843 u16 active_links); 4844 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4846 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4847 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4848 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4850 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4851 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4852 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4853 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4854 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 4855 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4856 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4857 struct net_device *dev, 4858 enum tc_setup_type type, 4859 void *type_data); 4860 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 4861 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4862 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 4863 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4864 enum nl80211_iftype type); 4865 }; 4866 4867 /** 4868 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4869 * 4870 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4871 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4872 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4873 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4874 * @priv_data_len. 4875 * 4876 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4877 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4878 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4879 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4880 * 4881 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4882 */ 4883 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4884 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4885 const char *requested_name); 4886 4887 /** 4888 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4889 * 4890 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4891 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4892 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4893 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4894 * @priv_data_len. 4895 * 4896 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4897 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4898 * 4899 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4900 */ 4901 static inline 4902 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4903 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4904 { 4905 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4906 } 4907 4908 /** 4909 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4910 * 4911 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4912 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4913 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4914 * 4915 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4916 * 4917 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4918 */ 4919 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4920 4921 /** 4922 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4923 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4924 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4925 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4926 */ 4927 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4928 int throughput; 4929 int blink_time; 4930 }; 4931 4932 /** 4933 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4934 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4935 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4936 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4937 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4938 */ 4939 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4940 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4941 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4942 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4943 }; 4944 4945 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4946 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4947 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4948 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4949 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4950 const char * 4951 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4952 unsigned int flags, 4953 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4954 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4955 #endif 4956 /** 4957 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4958 * 4959 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4960 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4961 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4962 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4963 * 4964 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4965 * 4966 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4967 */ 4968 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4969 { 4970 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4971 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4972 #else 4973 return NULL; 4974 #endif 4975 } 4976 4977 /** 4978 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4979 * 4980 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4981 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4982 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4983 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4984 * 4985 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4986 * 4987 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4988 */ 4989 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4990 { 4991 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4992 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4993 #else 4994 return NULL; 4995 #endif 4996 } 4997 4998 /** 4999 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 5000 * 5001 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5002 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5003 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5004 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5005 * 5006 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5007 * 5008 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5009 */ 5010 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5011 { 5012 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5013 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5014 #else 5015 return NULL; 5016 #endif 5017 } 5018 5019 /** 5020 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5021 * 5022 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5023 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5024 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5025 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5026 * 5027 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5028 * 5029 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5030 */ 5031 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5032 { 5033 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5034 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5035 #else 5036 return NULL; 5037 #endif 5038 } 5039 5040 /** 5041 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5042 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5043 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5044 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5045 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5046 * 5047 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5048 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5049 * 5050 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5051 */ 5052 static inline const char * 5053 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5054 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5055 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5056 { 5057 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5058 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5059 blink_table_len); 5060 #else 5061 return NULL; 5062 #endif 5063 } 5064 5065 /** 5066 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5067 * 5068 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5069 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5070 * 5071 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5072 */ 5073 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5074 5075 /** 5076 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5077 * 5078 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5079 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5080 * before calling this function. 5081 * 5082 * @hw: the hardware to free 5083 */ 5084 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5085 5086 /** 5087 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5088 * 5089 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5090 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5091 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5092 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5093 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5094 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5095 * 5096 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5097 */ 5098 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5099 5100 /** 5101 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5102 * 5103 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5104 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5105 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5106 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5107 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5108 * 5109 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5110 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5111 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5112 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5113 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5114 * 5115 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5116 * 5117 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5118 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5119 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5120 * @list: the destination list 5121 */ 5122 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5123 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5124 5125 /** 5126 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5127 * 5128 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5129 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5130 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5131 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5132 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5133 * 5134 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5135 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5136 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5137 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5138 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5139 * 5140 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5141 * 5142 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5143 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5144 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5145 * @napi: the NAPI context 5146 */ 5147 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5148 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5149 5150 /** 5151 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5152 * 5153 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5154 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5155 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5156 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5157 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5158 * 5159 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5160 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5161 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5162 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5163 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5164 * 5165 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5166 * 5167 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5168 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5169 */ 5170 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5171 { 5172 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5173 } 5174 5175 /** 5176 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5177 * 5178 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5179 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5180 * 5181 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5182 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5183 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5184 * 5185 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5186 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5187 */ 5188 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5189 5190 /** 5191 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5192 * 5193 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5194 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5195 * 5196 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5197 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5198 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5199 * 5200 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5201 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5202 */ 5203 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5204 struct sk_buff *skb) 5205 { 5206 local_bh_disable(); 5207 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5208 local_bh_enable(); 5209 } 5210 5211 /** 5212 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5213 * 5214 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5215 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5216 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5217 * 5218 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5219 * 5220 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5221 * each other. 5222 * 5223 * @sta: currently connected sta 5224 * @start: start or stop PS 5225 * 5226 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5227 */ 5228 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5229 5230 /** 5231 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5232 * (in process context) 5233 * 5234 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5235 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5236 * applies. 5237 * 5238 * @sta: currently connected sta 5239 * @start: start or stop PS 5240 * 5241 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5242 */ 5243 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5244 bool start) 5245 { 5246 int ret; 5247 5248 local_bh_disable(); 5249 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5250 local_bh_enable(); 5251 5252 return ret; 5253 } 5254 5255 /** 5256 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5257 * @sta: currently connected station 5258 * 5259 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5260 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5261 * connected station was received. 5262 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5263 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5264 * be serialized. 5265 */ 5266 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5267 5268 /** 5269 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5270 * @sta: currently connected station 5271 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5272 * 5273 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5274 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5275 * from a connected station was received. 5276 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5277 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5278 * serialized. 5279 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5280 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5281 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5282 * checks. 5283 */ 5284 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5285 5286 /* 5287 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5288 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5289 */ 5290 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5291 5292 /** 5293 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5294 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5295 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5296 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5297 * 5298 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5299 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5300 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5301 * 5302 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5303 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5304 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5305 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5306 * 5307 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5308 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5309 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5310 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5311 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5312 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5313 * 5314 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5315 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5316 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5317 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5318 * use this API. 5319 */ 5320 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5321 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5322 5323 /** 5324 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5325 * 5326 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5327 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5328 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5329 * 5330 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5331 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5332 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5333 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5334 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5335 */ 5336 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5337 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5338 struct sk_buff *skb, 5339 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5340 int max_rates); 5341 5342 /** 5343 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5344 * 5345 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5346 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5347 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5348 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5349 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5350 * slow stations to starve). 5351 * 5352 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5353 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5354 */ 5355 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5356 u32 thr); 5357 5358 /** 5359 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5360 * 5361 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5362 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5363 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5364 * 5365 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5366 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5367 * @info: tx status information 5368 */ 5369 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5370 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5371 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5372 5373 /** 5374 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5375 * 5376 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5377 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5378 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5379 * 5380 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5381 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5382 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5383 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5384 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5385 * 5386 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5387 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5388 */ 5389 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5390 struct sk_buff *skb); 5391 5392 /** 5393 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5394 * 5395 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5396 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5397 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5398 * 5399 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5400 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5401 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5402 * 5403 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5404 * @status: tx status information 5405 */ 5406 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5407 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5408 5409 /** 5410 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5411 * 5412 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5413 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5414 * specific skbs. 5415 * 5416 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5417 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5418 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5419 * 5420 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5421 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5422 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5423 * @info: tx status information 5424 */ 5425 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5426 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5427 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5428 { 5429 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5430 .sta = sta, 5431 .info = info, 5432 }; 5433 5434 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5435 } 5436 5437 /** 5438 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5439 * 5440 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5441 * 5442 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5443 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5444 * for a single hardware. 5445 * 5446 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5447 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5448 */ 5449 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5450 struct sk_buff *skb) 5451 { 5452 local_bh_disable(); 5453 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5454 local_bh_enable(); 5455 } 5456 5457 /** 5458 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5459 * 5460 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5461 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5462 * 5463 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5464 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5465 * 5466 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5467 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5468 */ 5469 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5470 struct sk_buff *skb); 5471 5472 /** 5473 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5474 * 5475 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5476 * connected STA. 5477 * 5478 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5479 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5480 */ 5481 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5482 5483 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5484 5485 /** 5486 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5487 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5488 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5489 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5490 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5491 * should be ignored. 5492 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5493 */ 5494 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5495 u16 tim_offset; 5496 u16 tim_length; 5497 5498 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5499 u16 mbssid_off; 5500 }; 5501 5502 /** 5503 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5504 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5505 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5506 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5507 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5508 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5509 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5510 * 5511 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5512 * obtain the beacon template. 5513 * 5514 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5515 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5516 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5517 * applicable, the CSA count. 5518 * 5519 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5520 * 5521 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5522 */ 5523 struct sk_buff * 5524 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5526 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5527 unsigned int link_id); 5528 5529 /** 5530 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5531 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5532 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5533 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5534 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5535 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5536 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5537 * 5538 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5539 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5540 * requested index. 5541 * 5542 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5543 */ 5544 struct sk_buff * 5545 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5546 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5547 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5548 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5549 5550 /** 5551 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5552 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5553 * 5554 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5555 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5556 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5557 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5558 */ 5559 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5560 u8 cnt; 5561 struct { 5562 struct sk_buff *skb; 5563 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5564 } bcn[]; 5565 }; 5566 5567 /** 5568 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5569 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5570 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5571 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5572 * 5573 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5574 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5575 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5576 * one multiple BSSID element. 5577 * 5578 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5579 * 5580 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5581 * %NULL on error. 5582 */ 5583 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5584 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5585 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5586 unsigned int link_id); 5587 5588 /** 5589 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5590 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5591 * 5592 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5593 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5594 */ 5595 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5596 5597 /** 5598 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5599 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5600 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5601 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5602 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5603 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5604 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5605 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5606 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5607 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5608 * 5609 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5610 * obtain the beacon frame. 5611 * 5612 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5613 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5614 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5615 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5616 * 5617 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5618 * 5619 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5620 */ 5621 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5622 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5623 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5624 unsigned int link_id); 5625 5626 /** 5627 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5628 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5629 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5630 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5631 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5632 * 5633 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5634 * 5635 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5636 */ 5637 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5639 unsigned int link_id) 5640 { 5641 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5642 } 5643 5644 /** 5645 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5646 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5647 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5648 * 5649 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5650 * This function is called implicitly when 5651 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5652 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5653 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5654 * 5655 * Return: new countdown value 5656 */ 5657 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5658 unsigned int link_id); 5659 5660 /** 5661 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5662 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5663 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5664 * 5665 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5666 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5667 * 5668 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5669 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5670 */ 5671 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5672 5673 /** 5674 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5675 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5676 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5677 * 5678 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5679 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5680 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5681 */ 5682 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5683 5684 /** 5685 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5686 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5687 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5688 * 5689 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5690 */ 5691 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5692 unsigned int link_id); 5693 5694 /** 5695 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5696 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5697 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5698 * 5699 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5700 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5701 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5702 */ 5703 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5704 5705 /** 5706 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5707 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5709 * 5710 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5711 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5712 * 5713 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5714 * 5715 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5716 */ 5717 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5718 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5719 5720 /** 5721 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5722 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5723 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5724 * 5725 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5726 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5727 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5728 * 5729 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5730 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5731 * 5732 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5733 */ 5734 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5735 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5736 5737 /** 5738 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5739 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5740 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5741 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5742 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5743 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5744 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5745 * if at all possible 5746 * 5747 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5748 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5749 * BSSID and address is used. 5750 * 5751 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5752 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5753 * 5754 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5755 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5756 * 5757 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5758 */ 5759 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5760 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5761 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5762 5763 /** 5764 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5765 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5766 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5767 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5768 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5769 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5770 * 5771 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5772 * hardware. 5773 * 5774 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5775 */ 5776 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5777 const u8 *src_addr, 5778 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5779 size_t tailroom); 5780 5781 /** 5782 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5783 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5784 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5785 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5786 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5787 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5788 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5789 * 5790 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5791 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5792 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5793 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5794 */ 5795 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5796 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5797 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5798 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5799 5800 /** 5801 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5802 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5803 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5804 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5805 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5806 * 5807 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5808 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5809 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5810 * 5811 * Return: The duration. 5812 */ 5813 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5815 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5816 5817 /** 5818 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5819 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5820 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5821 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5822 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5823 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5824 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5825 * 5826 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5827 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5828 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5829 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5830 */ 5831 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5832 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5833 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5834 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5835 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5836 5837 /** 5838 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5839 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5840 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5841 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5842 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5843 * 5844 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5845 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5846 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5847 * 5848 * Return: The duration. 5849 */ 5850 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5851 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5852 size_t frame_len, 5853 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5854 5855 /** 5856 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5857 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5858 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5859 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5860 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5861 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5862 * 5863 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5864 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5865 * 5866 * Return: The duration. 5867 */ 5868 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5870 enum nl80211_band band, 5871 size_t frame_len, 5872 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5873 5874 /** 5875 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5876 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5877 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5878 * 5879 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5880 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5881 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5882 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5883 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5884 * 5885 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5886 * frames are available. 5887 * 5888 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5889 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5890 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5891 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5892 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5893 * use common code for all beacons. 5894 */ 5895 struct sk_buff * 5896 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5897 5898 /** 5899 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5900 * 5901 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5902 * 5903 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5904 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5905 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5906 */ 5907 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5908 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5909 5910 /** 5911 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5912 * 5913 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5914 * from the given packet. 5915 * 5916 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5917 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5918 * with this P1K 5919 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5920 */ 5921 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5922 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5923 { 5924 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5925 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5926 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5927 5928 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5929 } 5930 5931 /** 5932 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5933 * 5934 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5935 * and transmitter address. 5936 * 5937 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5938 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5939 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5940 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5941 */ 5942 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5943 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5944 5945 /** 5946 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5947 * 5948 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5949 * in the packet. 5950 * 5951 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5952 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5953 * encrypted with this key 5954 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5955 */ 5956 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5957 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5958 5959 /** 5960 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5961 * 5962 * @pos: start of crypto header 5963 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5964 * @pn: PN to add 5965 * 5966 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5967 * the packet payload) 5968 * 5969 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5970 * point to the crypto header) 5971 */ 5972 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5973 5974 /** 5975 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5976 * 5977 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5978 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5979 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5980 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5981 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5982 * 5983 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5984 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5985 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5986 * 5987 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5988 * can be done concurrently. 5989 */ 5990 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5991 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5992 5993 /** 5994 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5995 * 5996 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5997 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5998 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5999 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 6000 * @seq: new sequence data 6001 * 6002 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 6003 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 6004 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 6005 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6006 * 6007 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6008 * can be done concurrently. 6009 */ 6010 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6011 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6012 6013 /** 6014 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 6015 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6016 * 6017 * Context: Must be called with the wiphy mutex held. 6018 * 6019 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 6020 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 6021 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 6022 */ 6023 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6024 6025 /** 6026 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6027 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6028 * @keyconf: new key data 6029 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6030 * 6031 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6032 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6033 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6034 * 6035 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6036 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6037 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6038 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6039 * 6040 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6041 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6042 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6043 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6044 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6045 * of the reconfiguration. 6046 * 6047 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6048 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6049 * 6050 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6051 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 6052 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 6053 * the key that's being replaced. 6054 */ 6055 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6056 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6057 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6058 int link_id); 6059 6060 /** 6061 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6062 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6063 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6064 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6065 * @gfp: allocation flags 6066 */ 6067 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6068 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6069 6070 /** 6071 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6072 * 6073 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6074 * at the same time. 6075 * 6076 * @keyconf: the key in question 6077 */ 6078 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6079 6080 /** 6081 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6082 * 6083 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6084 * at the same time. 6085 * 6086 * @keyconf: the key in question 6087 */ 6088 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6089 6090 /** 6091 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6092 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6093 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6094 * 6095 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6096 */ 6097 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6098 6099 /** 6100 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6101 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6102 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6103 * 6104 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6105 */ 6106 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6107 6108 /** 6109 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6110 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6111 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6112 * 6113 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6114 * 6115 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6116 */ 6117 6118 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6119 6120 /** 6121 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6122 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6123 * 6124 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6125 */ 6126 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6127 6128 /** 6129 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6130 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6131 * 6132 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6133 */ 6134 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6135 6136 /** 6137 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6138 * 6139 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6140 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6141 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6142 * any context, including hardirq context. 6143 * 6144 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6145 * @info: information about the completed scan 6146 */ 6147 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6148 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6149 6150 /** 6151 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6152 * 6153 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6154 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6155 * 6156 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6157 */ 6158 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6159 6160 /** 6161 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6162 * 6163 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6164 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6165 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6166 * while associating, for instance. 6167 * 6168 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6169 */ 6170 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6171 6172 /** 6173 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6174 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6175 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6176 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6177 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6178 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6179 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6180 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6181 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6182 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6183 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6184 * for instance. 6185 */ 6186 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6187 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6188 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6189 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6190 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6191 }; 6192 6193 /** 6194 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6195 * 6196 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6197 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6198 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6199 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6200 * 6201 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6202 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6203 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6204 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6205 */ 6206 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6207 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6208 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6209 void *data); 6210 6211 /** 6212 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6213 * 6214 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6215 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6216 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6217 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6218 * be used. 6219 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6220 * 6221 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6222 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6223 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6224 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6225 */ 6226 static inline void 6227 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6228 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6230 void *data) 6231 { 6232 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6233 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6234 iterator, data); 6235 } 6236 6237 /** 6238 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6239 * 6240 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6241 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6242 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6243 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6244 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6245 * 6246 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6247 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6248 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6249 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6250 */ 6251 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6252 u32 iter_flags, 6253 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6254 u8 *mac, 6255 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6256 void *data); 6257 6258 /** 6259 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6260 * 6261 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6262 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6263 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6264 * 6265 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6266 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6267 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6268 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6269 */ 6270 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6271 u32 iter_flags, 6272 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6273 u8 *mac, 6274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6275 void *data); 6276 6277 /** 6278 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6279 * 6280 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6281 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6282 * function for them. 6283 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6284 * 6285 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6286 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6287 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6288 */ 6289 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6290 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6291 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6292 void *data); 6293 6294 /** 6295 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6296 * 6297 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6298 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6299 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6300 * mutex. 6301 * 6302 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6303 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6304 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6305 */ 6306 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6307 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6308 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6309 void *data); 6310 6311 /** 6312 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6313 * 6314 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6315 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6316 * 6317 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6318 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6319 */ 6320 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6321 6322 /** 6323 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6324 * 6325 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6326 * workqueue. 6327 * 6328 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6329 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6330 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6331 */ 6332 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6333 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6334 unsigned long delay); 6335 6336 /** 6337 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6338 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6339 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6340 * 6341 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6342 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6343 * mac80211. 6344 * 6345 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6346 */ 6347 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6348 u16 tid); 6349 6350 /** 6351 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6352 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6353 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6354 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6355 * 6356 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6357 * 6358 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6359 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6360 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6361 */ 6362 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6363 u16 timeout); 6364 6365 /** 6366 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6367 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6368 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6369 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6370 * 6371 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6372 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6373 * from any context. 6374 */ 6375 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6376 u16 tid); 6377 6378 /** 6379 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6380 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6381 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6382 * 6383 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6384 * 6385 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6386 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6387 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6388 */ 6389 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6390 6391 /** 6392 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6393 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6394 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6395 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6396 * 6397 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6398 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6399 * can be called from any context. 6400 */ 6401 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6402 u16 tid); 6403 6404 /** 6405 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6406 * 6407 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6408 * @addr: station's address 6409 * 6410 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6411 * 6412 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6413 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6414 */ 6415 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6416 const u8 *addr); 6417 6418 /** 6419 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6420 * 6421 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6422 * @addr: remote station's address 6423 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6424 * 6425 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6426 * 6427 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6428 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6429 * 6430 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6431 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6432 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6433 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6434 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6435 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6436 * is not reliable. 6437 * 6438 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6439 */ 6440 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6441 const u8 *addr, 6442 const u8 *localaddr); 6443 6444 /** 6445 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6446 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6447 * @addr: remote station's link address 6448 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6449 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6450 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6451 * 6452 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6453 * 6454 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6455 */ 6456 struct ieee80211_sta * 6457 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6458 const u8 *addr, 6459 const u8 *localaddr, 6460 unsigned int *link_id); 6461 6462 /** 6463 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6464 * @hw: the hardware 6465 * @pubsta: the station 6466 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6467 * 6468 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6469 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6470 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6471 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6472 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6473 * 6474 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6475 * manner. 6476 * 6477 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6478 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6479 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6480 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6481 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6482 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6483 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6484 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6485 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6486 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6487 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6488 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6489 * woke up while blocked or not. 6490 */ 6491 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6492 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6493 6494 /** 6495 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6496 * @pubsta: the station 6497 * 6498 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6499 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6500 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6501 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6502 * 6503 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6504 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6505 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6506 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6507 * 6508 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6509 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6510 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6511 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6512 */ 6513 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6514 6515 /** 6516 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6517 * @pubsta: the station 6518 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6519 * 6520 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6521 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6522 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6523 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6524 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6525 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6526 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6527 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6528 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6529 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6530 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6531 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6532 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6533 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6534 */ 6535 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6536 6537 /** 6538 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6539 * @pubsta: the station 6540 * 6541 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6542 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6543 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6544 * 6545 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6546 * there is no need to call this function. 6547 */ 6548 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6549 6550 /** 6551 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6552 * 6553 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6554 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6555 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6556 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6557 * 6558 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6559 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6560 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6561 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6562 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6563 * attempts. 6564 * 6565 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6566 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6567 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6568 * them to 0. 6569 * 6570 * @pubsta: the station 6571 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6572 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6573 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6574 */ 6575 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6576 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6577 6578 /** 6579 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6580 * 6581 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6582 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6583 * 6584 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6585 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6586 */ 6587 bool 6588 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6589 6590 /** 6591 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6592 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6593 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6594 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6595 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6596 * 6597 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6598 * 6599 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6600 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6601 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6602 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6603 * 6604 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6605 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6606 * set_key callback. 6607 */ 6608 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6609 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6610 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6611 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6612 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6613 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6614 void *data), 6615 void *iter_data); 6616 6617 /** 6618 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6619 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6620 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6621 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6622 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6623 * 6624 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6625 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6626 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6627 * in removal process will be skipped. 6628 * 6629 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6630 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6631 */ 6632 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6633 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6634 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6635 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6636 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6637 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6638 void *data), 6639 void *iter_data); 6640 6641 /** 6642 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6643 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6644 * @iter: iterator function 6645 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6646 * 6647 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6648 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6649 * places while calling into the driver. 6650 * 6651 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6652 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6653 * removed. 6654 * 6655 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6656 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6657 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6658 * or not. 6659 */ 6660 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6661 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6662 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6663 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6664 void *data), 6665 void *iter_data); 6666 6667 /** 6668 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6669 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6670 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6671 * 6672 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6673 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6674 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6675 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6676 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6677 * %NULL. 6678 * 6679 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6680 */ 6681 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6682 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6683 6684 /** 6685 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6686 * 6687 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6688 * 6689 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6690 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6691 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6692 */ 6693 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6694 6695 /** 6696 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6697 * 6698 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6699 * 6700 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6701 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6702 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6703 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6704 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6705 * 6706 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6707 * without connection recovery attempts. 6708 */ 6709 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6710 6711 /** 6712 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6713 * 6714 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6715 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6716 * 6717 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6718 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6719 */ 6720 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6721 6722 /** 6723 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6724 * 6725 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6726 * 6727 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6728 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6729 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6730 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6731 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6732 * 6733 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6734 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6735 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6736 * disconnect normally later. 6737 * 6738 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6739 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6740 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6741 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6742 */ 6743 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6744 6745 /** 6746 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6747 * hardware restart 6748 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6749 * 6750 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6751 * hardware restart. 6752 */ 6753 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6754 6755 /** 6756 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6757 * rssi threshold triggered 6758 * 6759 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6760 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6761 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6762 * @gfp: context flags 6763 * 6764 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6765 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6766 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6767 */ 6768 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6769 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6770 s32 rssi_level, 6771 gfp_t gfp); 6772 6773 /** 6774 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6775 * 6776 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6777 * @gfp: context flags 6778 */ 6779 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6780 6781 /** 6782 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6783 * 6784 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6785 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 6786 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 6787 */ 6788 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6789 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 6790 6791 /** 6792 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6793 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6794 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6795 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 6796 * false. 6797 * 6798 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6799 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6800 */ 6801 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 6802 unsigned int link_id); 6803 6804 /** 6805 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6806 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6807 * 6808 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6809 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6810 * a deauth frame in this case. 6811 */ 6812 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6813 6814 /** 6815 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6816 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6817 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6818 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6819 * 6820 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6821 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6822 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6823 */ 6824 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6825 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6826 6827 /** 6828 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6829 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6830 */ 6831 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6832 6833 /** 6834 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6835 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6836 */ 6837 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6838 6839 /** 6840 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6841 * 6842 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6843 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6844 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6845 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6846 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6847 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6848 * 6849 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6850 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6851 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6852 */ 6853 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6854 const u8 *addr); 6855 6856 /** 6857 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6858 * @pubsta: station struct 6859 * @tid: the session's TID 6860 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6861 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6862 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6863 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6864 * 6865 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6866 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6867 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6868 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6869 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 6870 */ 6871 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6872 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6873 u16 received_mpdus); 6874 6875 /** 6876 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6877 * 6878 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6879 * buffer. 6880 * 6881 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6882 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6883 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6884 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6885 */ 6886 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6887 6888 /** 6889 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6890 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6891 * @addr: station mac address 6892 * @tid: the rx tid 6893 */ 6894 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6895 unsigned int tid); 6896 6897 /** 6898 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6899 * 6900 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6901 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6902 * reordering. 6903 * 6904 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6905 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6906 * 6907 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6908 * @addr: station mac address 6909 * @tid: the rx tid 6910 */ 6911 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6912 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6913 { 6914 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6915 return; 6916 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6917 } 6918 6919 /** 6920 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6921 * 6922 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6923 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6924 * reordering. 6925 * 6926 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6927 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6928 * 6929 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6930 * @addr: station mac address 6931 * @tid: the rx tid 6932 */ 6933 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6934 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6935 { 6936 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6937 return; 6938 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6939 } 6940 6941 /** 6942 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6943 * 6944 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6945 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6946 * 6947 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6948 * 6949 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6950 * @addr: station mac address 6951 * @tid: the rx tid 6952 */ 6953 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6954 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6955 6956 /* Rate control API */ 6957 6958 /** 6959 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6960 * 6961 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6962 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6963 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6964 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6965 * to be filled in 6966 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6967 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6968 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6969 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6970 * RTS threshold 6971 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6972 * if the selected rate supports it 6973 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6974 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6975 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6976 */ 6977 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6978 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6979 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6980 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6981 struct sk_buff *skb; 6982 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6983 bool rts, short_preamble; 6984 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6985 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6986 bool bss; 6987 }; 6988 6989 /** 6990 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6991 */ 6992 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6993 /** 6994 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6995 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6996 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6997 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6998 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6999 */ 7000 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 7001 /** 7002 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 7003 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 7004 */ 7005 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7006 }; 7007 7008 struct rate_control_ops { 7009 unsigned long capa; 7010 const char *name; 7011 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7012 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7013 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7014 void (*free)(void *priv); 7015 7016 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7017 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7018 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7019 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7020 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7021 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7022 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7023 u32 changed); 7024 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7025 void *priv_sta); 7026 7027 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7028 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7029 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7030 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7031 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7032 struct sk_buff *skb); 7033 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7034 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7035 7036 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7037 struct dentry *dir); 7038 7039 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7040 }; 7041 7042 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7043 enum nl80211_band band, 7044 int index) 7045 { 7046 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7047 } 7048 7049 static inline s8 7050 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7051 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7052 { 7053 int i; 7054 7055 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7056 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7057 return i; 7058 7059 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7060 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7061 7062 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7063 return 0; 7064 } 7065 7066 static inline 7067 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7068 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7069 { 7070 unsigned int i; 7071 7072 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7073 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7074 return true; 7075 return false; 7076 } 7077 7078 /** 7079 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7080 * 7081 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7082 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7083 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7084 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7085 * 7086 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7087 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7088 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7089 * 7090 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7091 */ 7092 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7093 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7094 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7095 7096 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7097 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7098 7099 static inline bool 7100 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7101 { 7102 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7103 } 7104 7105 static inline bool 7106 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7107 { 7108 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7109 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7110 } 7111 7112 static inline bool 7113 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7114 { 7115 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7116 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7117 } 7118 7119 static inline bool 7120 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7121 { 7122 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7123 } 7124 7125 static inline bool 7126 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7127 { 7128 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7129 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7130 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7131 } 7132 7133 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7134 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7135 { 7136 if (p2p) { 7137 switch (type) { 7138 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7139 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7140 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7141 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7142 default: 7143 break; 7144 } 7145 } 7146 return type; 7147 } 7148 7149 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7150 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7151 { 7152 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7153 } 7154 7155 /** 7156 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7157 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7158 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7159 * 7160 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7161 */ 7162 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7163 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7165 { 7166 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7167 } 7168 7169 /** 7170 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7171 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7172 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7173 * 7174 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7175 */ 7176 static inline __le16 7177 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7179 { 7180 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7181 } 7182 7183 /** 7184 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif 7185 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7186 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7187 * 7188 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7189 */ 7190 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7191 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7193 { 7194 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7195 } 7196 7197 /** 7198 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7199 * 7200 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7201 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7202 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7203 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7204 * 7205 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7206 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7207 * matching GroupId management frame. 7208 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7209 */ 7210 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7211 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7212 7213 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7214 int rssi_min_thold, 7215 int rssi_max_thold); 7216 7217 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7218 7219 /** 7220 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7221 * 7222 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7223 * 7224 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7225 * 7226 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7227 * applicable. 7228 */ 7229 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7230 7231 /** 7232 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7233 * @vif: virtual interface 7234 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7235 * @gfp: allocation flags 7236 * 7237 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7238 */ 7239 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7240 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7241 gfp_t gfp); 7242 7243 /** 7244 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7245 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7246 * @vif: virtual interface 7247 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7248 * @band: the band to transmit on 7249 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7250 * 7251 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise 7252 * 7253 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7254 */ 7255 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7256 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7257 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7258 7259 /** 7260 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7261 * of injected frames. 7262 * 7263 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7264 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7265 * of the skb before calling this function. 7266 * 7267 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7268 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7269 * 7270 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7271 */ 7272 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7273 struct net_device *dev); 7274 7275 /** 7276 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7277 * 7278 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7279 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7280 * 7281 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7282 * 7283 * private: 7284 * 7285 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7286 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7287 */ 7288 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7289 u32 next_tsf; 7290 bool has_next_tsf; 7291 7292 u8 absent; 7293 7294 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7295 struct { 7296 u32 start; 7297 u32 duration; 7298 u32 interval; 7299 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7300 }; 7301 7302 /** 7303 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7304 * 7305 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7306 * @data: NoA tracking data 7307 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7308 * 7309 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7310 */ 7311 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7312 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7313 7314 /** 7315 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7316 * 7317 * @data: NoA tracking data 7318 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7319 */ 7320 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7321 7322 /** 7323 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7324 * @vif: virtual interface 7325 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7326 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7327 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7328 * @gfp: allocation flags 7329 * 7330 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7331 */ 7332 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7333 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7334 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7335 7336 /** 7337 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7338 * 7339 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7340 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7341 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7342 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7343 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7344 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7345 * 7346 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7347 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7348 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7349 * 7350 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7351 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7352 * 7353 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7354 */ 7355 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7356 7357 /** 7358 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7359 * 7360 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7361 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7362 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7363 * 7364 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7365 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7366 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7367 * 7368 * @sta: the station 7369 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7370 */ 7371 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7372 7373 /** 7374 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7375 * 7376 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7377 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7378 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7379 * 7380 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7381 * 7382 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7383 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7384 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7385 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7386 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7387 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7388 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7389 * 7390 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7391 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7392 */ 7393 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7394 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7395 7396 /** 7397 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7398 * (in process context) 7399 * 7400 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7401 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7402 * 7403 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7404 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7405 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7406 * 7407 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7408 */ 7409 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7410 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7411 { 7412 struct sk_buff *skb; 7413 7414 local_bh_disable(); 7415 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7416 local_bh_enable(); 7417 7418 return skb; 7419 } 7420 7421 /** 7422 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7423 * 7424 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7425 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7426 * 7427 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7428 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7429 */ 7430 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7431 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7432 7433 /** 7434 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7435 * 7436 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7437 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7438 * 7439 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7440 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7441 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7442 */ 7443 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7444 7445 /** 7446 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7447 * 7448 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7449 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7450 * 7451 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7452 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7453 */ 7454 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7455 7456 /* (deprecated) */ 7457 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7458 { 7459 } 7460 7461 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7462 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7463 7464 /** 7465 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7466 * 7467 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7468 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7469 * 7470 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7471 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7472 * 7473 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7474 * this TXQ internally. 7475 */ 7476 static inline void 7477 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7478 { 7479 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7480 } 7481 7482 /** 7483 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7484 * 7485 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7486 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7487 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7488 * 7489 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7490 * internally. 7491 */ 7492 static inline void 7493 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7494 bool force) 7495 { 7496 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7497 } 7498 7499 /** 7500 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7501 * 7502 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7503 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7504 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7505 * next_txq(). 7506 * 7507 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7508 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7509 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7510 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7511 * again. 7512 * 7513 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7514 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7515 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7516 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7517 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7518 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7519 * 7520 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7521 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7522 * 7523 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7524 */ 7525 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7526 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7527 7528 /** 7529 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7530 * 7531 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7532 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7533 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7534 * 7535 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7536 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7537 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7538 */ 7539 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7540 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7541 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7542 7543 /** 7544 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7545 * 7546 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7547 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7548 * 7549 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7550 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7551 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7552 * @gfp: allocation flags 7553 */ 7554 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7555 u8 inst_id, 7556 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7557 gfp_t gfp); 7558 7559 /** 7560 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7561 * 7562 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7563 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7564 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7565 * 7566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7567 * @match: match event information 7568 * @gfp: allocation flags 7569 */ 7570 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7571 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7572 gfp_t gfp); 7573 7574 /** 7575 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7576 * 7577 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7578 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7579 * 7580 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7581 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7582 * information. 7583 * @len: frame length in bytes 7584 * 7585 * Return: the airtime estimate 7586 */ 7587 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7588 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7589 int len); 7590 7591 /** 7592 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7593 * 7594 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7595 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7596 * 7597 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7598 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7599 * @len: frame length in bytes 7600 * 7601 * Return: the airtime estimate 7602 */ 7603 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7604 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7605 int len); 7606 /** 7607 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7608 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7609 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7610 * 7611 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7612 * 7613 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7614 */ 7615 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7617 7618 /** 7619 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7620 * probe response template. 7621 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7622 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7623 * 7624 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7625 * 7626 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7627 */ 7628 struct sk_buff * 7629 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7631 7632 /** 7633 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7634 * collision. 7635 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 7636 * 7637 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7638 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7639 * aware of. 7640 */ 7641 void 7642 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7643 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 7644 7645 /** 7646 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7647 * 7648 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7649 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7650 * 7651 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7652 * 7653 * Return: %true if @skb is a data frame, %false otherwise 7654 */ 7655 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7656 { 7657 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7658 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7659 7660 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7661 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7662 } 7663 7664 /** 7665 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7666 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7667 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7668 * 7669 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 7670 * back into the driver. 7671 * 7672 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7673 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7674 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7675 * 7676 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7677 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7678 * a sequence of calls like 7679 * 7680 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7681 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7682 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7683 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7684 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7685 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7686 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7687 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7688 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7689 * 7690 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7691 */ 7692 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7693 7694 /** 7695 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7696 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7697 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7698 * 7699 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7700 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7701 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7702 * completed after it returns. 7703 */ 7704 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7705 u16 active_links); 7706 7707 /** 7708 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 7709 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 7710 * 7711 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 7712 * TTLM request. 7713 */ 7714 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7715 7716 /** 7717 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 7718 * @width: the channel width value to convert 7719 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 7720 */ 7721 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 7722 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 7723 { 7724 switch (width) { 7725 default: 7726 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7727 fallthrough; 7728 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 7729 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 7730 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 7731 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 7732 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 7733 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 7734 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 7735 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 7736 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 7737 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 7738 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 7739 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 7740 } 7741 } 7742 7743 /** 7744 * ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw - prepare for sending BW RX OMI 7745 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI is going to be sent to 7746 * @bw: the bandwidth requested 7747 * 7748 * When the driver decides to do RX OMI to change bandwidth with a STA 7749 * it calls this function to prepare, then sends the OMI, and finally 7750 * calls ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(). 7751 * 7752 * Note that the (link) STA rate control is updated accordingly as well, 7753 * but the chanctx might not be updated if there are other users. 7754 * If the intention is to reduce the listen bandwidth, the driver must 7755 * ensure there are no TDLS stations nor other uses of the chanctx. 7756 * 7757 * Also note that in order to sequence correctly, narrowing bandwidth 7758 * will only happen in ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(), whereas widening 7759 * again (e.g. going back to normal) will happen here. 7760 * 7761 * Note that we treat this symmetrically, so if the driver calls this 7762 * and tells the peer to only send with a lower bandwidth, we assume 7763 * that the driver also wants to only send at that lower bandwidth, to 7764 * allow narrowing of the chanctx request for this station/interface. 7765 * 7766 * Finally, the driver must ensure that if the function returned %true, 7767 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw() is also called, even for example in 7768 * case of HW restart. 7769 * 7770 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held, and will call back 7771 * into the driver, so ensure no driver locks are held. 7772 * 7773 * Return: %true if changes are going to be made, %false otherwise 7774 */ 7775 bool ieee80211_prepare_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 7776 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bw); 7777 7778 /** 7779 * ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw - finalize BW RX OMI update 7780 * @link_sta: the link STA the OMI was sent to 7781 * 7782 * See ieee80211_client_prepare_rx_omi_bw(). Context is the same here 7783 * as well. 7784 */ 7785 void ieee80211_finalize_rx_omi_bw(struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta); 7786 7787 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 7788 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7789 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7790 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7791 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7792 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7793 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 7794 u32 changed); 7795 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7796 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 7797 int n_vifs, 7798 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 7799 7800 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7801